blob: 7ceed99a05bc79218a841352a454a980df48741b [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07007 *
8 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
9 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
10 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
11 */
12
13#ifndef MAC80211_H
14#define MAC80211_H
15
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050016#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070017#include <linux/kernel.h>
18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020022#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040024/**
25 * DOC: Introduction
26 *
27 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
28 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
29 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
30 * drivers.
31 */
32
33/**
34 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
35 *
36 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070037 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
38 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
39 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010040 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
41 * tasklet function.
42 *
43 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070044 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070045 */
46
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040047/**
48 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070049 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
51 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
52 */
53
54/**
55 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070056 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040057 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
58 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
59 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
60 * hardware.
61 *
62 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
63 *
64 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
65 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
66 *
67 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
68 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
69 *
70 * Finally, for received frames, the driver is able to indicate that it has
71 * filled a radiotap header and put that in front of the frame; if it does
72 * not do so then mac80211 may add this under certain circumstances.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070073 */
74
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020075/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040076 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
77 *
78 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
79 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
80 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
81 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
82 *
83 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
84 * suspend.
85 *
86 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
87 *
88 */
89
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050090struct device;
91
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040092/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020093 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
94 *
95 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010096 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020097 */
98enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020099 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100100 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200101};
102
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200103#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
104
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200105/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800106 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
108 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
109 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
110 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
111 */
112enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
113 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
114 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
115 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
116 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
117};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200118#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800119
120/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400121 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
122 *
123 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100124 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400125 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400126 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200127 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
128 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400129 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100130 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300131 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200132 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400133 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700134struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100136 u16 cw_min;
137 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200138 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300139 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200140 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700141};
142
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700143struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
144 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
145 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
146 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
147 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
148};
149
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100150/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200151 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200153 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200155 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
156 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200157 */
158enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200162 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200163};
164
165/**
166 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
167 *
168 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
169 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
170 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100171 * @def: the channel definition
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200172 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
173 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
174 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
175 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100176 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100177 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200178 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
179 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
180 */
181struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200183
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
185
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100186 bool radar_enabled;
187
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100188 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189};
190
191/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100192 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
193 *
194 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
195 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
196 *
197 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
198 * also implies a change in the AID.
199 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
200 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300201 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700202 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200203 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200204 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200205 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
206 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
207 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
208 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
209 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
210 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200211 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200212 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300213 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200214 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
215 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200216 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200217 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200218 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300219 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200220 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100221 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
222 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300223 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
224 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100225 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
226 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
227 * context had been assigned.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100228 */
229enum ieee80211_bss_change {
230 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
231 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
232 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300233 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200234 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200235 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200236 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200237 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
238 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
239 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200240 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200241 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300242 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200243 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200244 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300245 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200246 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300247 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200248 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100249 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300250 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100251 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200252
253 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100254};
255
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300256/*
257 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
258 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
259 * filtering will be disabled.
260 */
261#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
262
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100263/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700264 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
265 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
266 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
267 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
268 */
269enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
270 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
271 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
272};
273
274/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100275 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
276 *
277 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
278 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
279 *
280 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200281 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
282 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530283 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100284 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
285 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200286 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
287 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
288 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
289 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
290 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
291 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100292 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200293 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300294 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200295 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100296 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
297 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
298 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
299 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
300 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200301 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
302 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100303 * (see @sync_tsf)
304 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
305 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700306 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800307 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200308 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
309 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
310 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300311 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100312 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200313 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
314 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100315 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
316 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100317 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200318 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200319 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
320 * implies disabled
321 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300322 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
323 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
324 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
325 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100326 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
327 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
328 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200329 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200330 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
331 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
332 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300333 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
334 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200335 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300336 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
337 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200338 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100339 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100340 */
341struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200342 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100343 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200344 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530345 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100346 u16 aid;
347 /* erp related data */
348 bool use_cts_prot;
349 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300350 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200351 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800352 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700353 u16 beacon_int;
354 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200355 u64 sync_tsf;
356 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100357 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100358 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300359 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100360 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200361 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200362 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
363 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100364 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300365 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100366 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200367 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200368 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300369 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300370 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
371 size_t ssid_len;
372 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200373 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100374 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100375};
376
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800377/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200378 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800379 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700380 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800381 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100382 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200383 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
384 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
385 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
386 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
387 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
388 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
389 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
390 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
391 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
392 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
393 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200394 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200395 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
396 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200397 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200398 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
399 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200400 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200401 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200402 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
403 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
404 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
405 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
406 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
407 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
408 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
409 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200410 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
411 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
412 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300413 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
414 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200415 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
416 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
417 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600418 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
419 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
420 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100421 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
422 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
423 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200424 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
425 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200426 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
427 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100428 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
429 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
430 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200431 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
432 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
433 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
434 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100435 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
436 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
437 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100438 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
439 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
440 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200441 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
442 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
443 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400444 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200445 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
446 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100447 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
448 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
449 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
450 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200451 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
452 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
453 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530454 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
455 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
456 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200457 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
458 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
459 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200460 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
461 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530462 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
463 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
464 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200465 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
466 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
467 * monitor injection).
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200468 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
469 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200470 *
471 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
472 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800473 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200474enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200475 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200476 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
477 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
478 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
479 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
480 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
481 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
482 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
483 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
484 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
485 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
486 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
487 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600488 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100489 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200490 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200491 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100492 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200493 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100494 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100495 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200496 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400497 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200498 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100499 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200500 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530501 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200502 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530503 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200504 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200505 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200506};
507
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200508#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
509
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200510/**
511 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
512 *
513 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
514 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
515 *
516 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
517 */
518enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
519 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
520};
521
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200522/*
523 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
524 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
525 */
526#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
527 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
528 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
529 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
530 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100531 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200532 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200533 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200534
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530535/**
536 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
537 * Rate Control algorithm.
538 *
539 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
540 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
541 *
542 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
543 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
544 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
545 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
546 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100547 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
548 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530549 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
550 * Greenfield mode.
551 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100552 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
553 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
554 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530555 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
556 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
557 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
558 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
559 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200560enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
561 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
562 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
563 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
564
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100565 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200566 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
567 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
568 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
569 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
570 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100571 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
572 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
573 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800574};
575
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200576
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200577/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
578#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200579
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200580/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
581#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
582
583/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200584#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200585
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200586/* maximum number of rate table entries */
587#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
588
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200589/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200590 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200591 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200592 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
593 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200594 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200595 *
596 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
597 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
598 *
599 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
600 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200601 *
602 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
603 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
604 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
605 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
606 * information
607 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
608 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
609 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
610 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
611 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
612 * information should then contain
613 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
614 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
615 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200616 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200617struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
618 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100619 u16 count:5,
620 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000621} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200622
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100623#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
624
625static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
626 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
627{
628 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200629 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
630 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100631}
632
633static inline u8
634ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
635{
636 return rate->idx & 0xF;
637}
638
639static inline u8
640ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
641{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200642 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100643}
644
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200645/**
646 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200647 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200648 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
649 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
650 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
651 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
652 *
653 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200654 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200655 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100656 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700657 * @control: union for control data
658 * @status: union for status data
659 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100660 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700661 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100662 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700663 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200664 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200665 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200666struct ieee80211_tx_info {
667 /* common information */
668 u32 flags;
669 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200670
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200671 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100672
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100673 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100674
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200675 union {
676 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200677 union {
678 /* rate control */
679 struct {
680 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
681 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
682 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200683 u8 use_rts:1;
684 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200685 u8 short_preamble:1;
686 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200687 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200688 };
689 /* only needed before rate control */
690 unsigned long jiffies;
691 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200692 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
694 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200695 u32 flags;
696 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200697 } control;
698 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200699 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200700 int ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200701 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100702 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200703 u8 antenna;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200704 /* 21 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200705 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200706 struct {
707 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
708 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200709 u8 pad[4];
710
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200711 void *rate_driver_data[
712 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
713 };
714 void *driver_data[
715 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200716 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700717};
718
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300719/**
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -0700720 * struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies - scheduled scan IEs
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300721 *
722 * This structure is used to pass the appropriate IEs to be used in scheduled
723 * scans for all bands. It contains both the IEs passed from the userspace
724 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
725 *
726 * @ie: array with the IEs for each supported band
727 * @len: array with the total length of the IEs for each band
728 */
729struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies {
730 u8 *ie[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
731 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
732};
733
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200734static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
735{
736 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
737}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400738
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200739static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
740{
741 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
742}
743
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200744/**
745 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
746 *
747 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
748 *
749 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
750 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
751 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
752 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
753 *
754 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
755 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
756 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
757 */
758static inline void
759ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
760{
761 int i;
762
763 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
764 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
765 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
766 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
767 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
768 /* clear the rate counts */
769 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
770 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
771
772 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200773 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200774 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
775 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
776 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
777}
778
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400779
780/**
781 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
782 *
783 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
784 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
785 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
786 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400787 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
788 * verification has been done by the hardware.
789 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
790 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
791 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400792 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
793 * the frame.
794 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
795 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800796 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100797 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
798 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
799 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800800 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
801 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
802 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200803 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200804 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100805 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200806 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100807 * @RX_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
808 * @RX_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
809 * @RX_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200810 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100811 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
812 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200813 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
814 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
815 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200816 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
817 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
818 * each A-MPDU
819 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
820 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
821 * monitoring purposes only
822 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
823 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
824 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
825 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
826 * on this subframe
827 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
828 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200829 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200830 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
831 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200832 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
833 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
834 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
835 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
836 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
837 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
838 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
839 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
840 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400841 */
842enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200843 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
844 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
845 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
846 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
847 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
848 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800849 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200850 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
851 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
852 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
853 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
854 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
855 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
856 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
857 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
858 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
859 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
860 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
861 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
862 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800863 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100864 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
865 RX_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(23),
866 RX_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(24),
867 RX_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200868 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200869 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
870 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200871 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400872};
873
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200874#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
875
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400876/**
877 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
878 *
879 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
880 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200881 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200882 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900883 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
884 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200885 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
886 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100887 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400888 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200889 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
890 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
891 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200892 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
893 * values were filled.
894 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
895 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400896 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200897 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100898 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
899 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400900 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200901 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200902 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
903 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
904 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg90b9e4462012-11-16 10:09:08 +0100905 * @vendor_radiotap_bitmap: radiotap vendor namespace presence bitmap
906 * @vendor_radiotap_len: radiotap vendor namespace length
907 * @vendor_radiotap_align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. Note
908 * that the actual data must be at the start of the SKB data
909 * already.
910 * @vendor_radiotap_oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
911 * @vendor_radiotap_subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400912 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700913struct ieee80211_rx_status {
914 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200915 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200916 u32 ampdu_reference;
917 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg90b9e4462012-11-16 10:09:08 +0100918 u32 vendor_radiotap_bitmap;
919 u16 vendor_radiotap_len;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200920 u16 freq;
921 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100922 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200923 u8 rx_flags;
924 u8 band;
925 u8 antenna;
926 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200927 u8 chains;
928 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200929 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Johannes Berg90b9e4462012-11-16 10:09:08 +0100930 u8 vendor_radiotap_align;
931 u8 vendor_radiotap_oui[3];
932 u8 vendor_radiotap_subns;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700933};
934
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400935/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400936 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
937 *
938 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
939 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100940 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
941 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
942 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +0200943 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
944 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
945 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
946 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
947 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
948 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
949 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200950 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
951 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
952 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
953 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
954 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200955 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
956 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400957 */
958enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100959 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +0200960 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200961 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200962 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400963};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700964
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200965
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700966/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200967 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
968 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200969 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100970 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200971 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200972 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +0100973 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +0200974 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200975 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100976 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200977 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
978 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200979 */
980enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100981 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200982 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100983 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200984 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200985 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
986 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
987 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200988 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200989};
990
991/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100992 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
993 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200994 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
995 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
996 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
997 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
998 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100999 */
1000enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1001 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1002 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1003 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1004 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1005
1006 /* keep last */
1007 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1008};
1009
1010/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001011 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1012 *
1013 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1014 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001015 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1016 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001017 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001018 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001019 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1020 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1021 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1022 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001023 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1024 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1025 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001026 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1027 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1028 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1029 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001030 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1031 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001032 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001033 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001034 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001035 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001036 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001037 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1038 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001039 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001040 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1041 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001042 *
1043 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1044 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001045 * configured for an HT channel.
1046 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1047 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001048 */
1049struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001050 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001051 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001052 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001053
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001054 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001055 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001056
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001057 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1058
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001059 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001060 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001061 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001062};
1063
1064/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001065 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1066 *
1067 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1068 * operation.
1069 *
1070 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1071 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1072 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1073 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1074 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1075 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001076 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001077 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1078 */
1079struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1080 u64 timestamp;
1081 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001082 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001083 u8 count;
1084};
1085
1086/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001087 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1088 *
1089 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1090 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001091 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1092 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1093 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1094 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001095 */
1096enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1097 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001098 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001099};
1100
1101/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001102 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1103 *
1104 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1105 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1106 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001107 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001108 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1109 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001110 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001111 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1112 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001113 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001114 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1115 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1116 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1117 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001118 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1119 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001120 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1121 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1122 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1123 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1124 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001125 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001126 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001127 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001128 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1129 * sizeof(void *).
1130 */
1131struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001132 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001133 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001134 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001135 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001136 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001137
1138 u8 cab_queue;
1139 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1140
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001141 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1142
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001143 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001144
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001145#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1146 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1147#endif
1148
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001149 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001150 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001151};
1152
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001153static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1154{
1155#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001156 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001157#endif
1158 return false;
1159}
1160
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001161/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001162 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1163 *
1164 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1165 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1166 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001167 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1168 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1169 * particular key.
1170 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1171 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1172 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001173 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1174 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001175 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001176 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1177 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001178 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001179 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001180 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1181 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001182 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1183 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1184 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1185 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1186 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1187 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1188 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001189 */
1190enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001191 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = 1<<1,
1192 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC= 1<<2,
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001193 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = 1<<3,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001194 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = 1<<4,
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001195 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = 1<<5,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001196 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001197};
1198
1199/**
1200 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1201 *
1202 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1203 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1204 *
1205 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1206 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001207 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001208 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001209 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1210 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1211 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001212 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1213 * data block:
1214 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1215 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1216 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001217 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1218 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001219 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001220struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001221 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001222 u8 icv_len;
1223 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001224 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001225 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001226 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001227 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001228 u8 key[0];
1229};
1230
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001231/**
1232 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1233 *
1234 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1235 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1236 *
1237 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1238 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1239 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001240enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001241 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001242};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001243
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001244/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001245 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1246 *
1247 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1248 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1249 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1250 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1251 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1252 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1253 */
1254enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1255 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1256 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1257 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1258 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1259 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1260 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1261};
1262
1263/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001264 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1265 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1266 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1267 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1268 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1269 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1270 *
1271 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1272 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1273 */
1274enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1275 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1276 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1277 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1278 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1279};
1280
1281/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001282 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1283 *
1284 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001285 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001286 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1287 */
1288struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1289 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1290 struct {
1291 s8 idx;
1292 u8 count;
1293 u8 count_cts;
1294 u8 count_rts;
1295 u16 flags;
1296 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1297};
1298
1299/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001300 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1301 *
1302 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1303 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1304 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1305 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1306 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001307 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001308 *
1309 * @addr: MAC address
1310 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001311 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001312 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1313 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001314 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports WME. Only valid during AP-mode.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001315 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1316 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001317 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1318 * if wme is supported.
1319 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001320 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001321 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1322 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1323 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1324 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001325 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001326 * @rates: rate control selection table
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001327 */
1328struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001329 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001330 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1331 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001332 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001333 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001334 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001335 u8 uapsd_queues;
1336 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001337 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001338 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001339 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001340 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001341
1342 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001343 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001344};
1345
1346/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001347 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1348 *
1349 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301350 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001351 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001352 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1353 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1354 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001355enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001356 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1357};
1358
1359/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001360 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1361 *
1362 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1363 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1364 */
1365struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1366 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1367};
1368
1369/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001370 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1371 *
1372 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1373 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1374 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1375 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1376 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1377 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001378 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1379 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1380 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1381 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1382 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1383 * algorithm.
1384 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1385 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1386 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1387 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1388 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1389 * CCK frames.
1390 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001391 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1392 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1393 * the FCS at the end.
1394 *
1395 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1396 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1397 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1398 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1399 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1400 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001401 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001402 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001403 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1404 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1405 *
1406 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1407 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1408 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001409 *
1410 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1411 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1412 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1413 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1414 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001415 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1416 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1417 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1418 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1419 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001420 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1421 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1422 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301423 *
1424 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1425 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001426 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001427 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1428 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1429 *
1430 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1431 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1432 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1433 *
1434 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1435 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001436 *
1437 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1438 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001439 *
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001440 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS:
1441 * Hardware supports static spatial multiplexing powersave,
1442 * ie. can turn off all but one chain even on HT connections
1443 * that should be using more chains.
1444 *
1445 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS:
1446 * Hardware supports dynamic spatial multiplexing powersave,
1447 * ie. can turn off all but one chain and then wake the rest
1448 * up as required after, for example, rts/cts handshake.
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001449 *
1450 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1451 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1452 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1453 * conf_tx() operation.
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301454 *
1455 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1456 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1457 * the stack.
1458 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001459 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001460 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1461 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
1462 * When this flag is set, signaling beacon-loss will cause an immediate
1463 * change to disassociated state.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001464 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001465 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1466 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1467 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001468 *
1469 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1470 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1471 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1472 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1473 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1474 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001475 *
1476 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1477 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1478 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1479 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1480 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1481 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001482 *
1483 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1484 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1485 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001486 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001487 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1488 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1489 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001490 *
1491 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1492 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1493 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1494 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001495 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001496 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1497 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1498 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001499 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1500 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1501 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001502 *
1503 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1504 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001505 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001506 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1507 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1508 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1509 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001510 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1511 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1512 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1513 * CSA frame.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001514 */
1515enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001516 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001517 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1518 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001519 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1520 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001521 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001522 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001523 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001524 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1525 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1526 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1527 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1528 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1529 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001530 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001531 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS = 1<<15,
1532 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS = 1<<16,
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001533 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301534 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001535 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001536 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001537 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001538 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001539 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001540 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001541 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001542 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001543 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001544 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001545};
1546
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001547/**
1548 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001549 *
1550 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1551 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1552 *
1553 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1554 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1555 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001556 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1557 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001558 *
1559 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1560 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001561 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1562 * along with this structure.
1563 *
1564 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1565 *
1566 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1567 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1568 *
1569 * @channel_change_time: time (in microseconds) it takes to change channels.
1570 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001571 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001572 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001573 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001574 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001575 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001576 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001577 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001578 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1579 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1580 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001581 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1582 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1583 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001584 *
1585 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1586 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001587 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1588 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001589 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1590 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001591 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001592 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1593 * can handle.
1594 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1595 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001596 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001597 *
1598 * @napi_weight: weight used for NAPI polling. You must specify an
1599 * appropriate value here if a napi_poll operation is provided
1600 * by your driver.
Randy Dunlap858022a2011-03-18 09:33:02 -07001601 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001602 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1603 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1604 * aggregation.
1605 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1606 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1607 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001608 *
1609 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1610 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1611 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001612 *
1613 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1614 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001615 *
1616 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1617 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1618 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1619 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001620 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001621 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1622 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1623 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1624 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001625 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1626 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1627 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001628 *
1629 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1630 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1631 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1632 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1633 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1634 * neither enabled.
1635 *
1636 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1637 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1638 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001639 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001640struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001641 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001642 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001643 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001644 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001645 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001646 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001647 int channel_change_time;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001648 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001649 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001650 int chanctx_data_size;
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001651 int napi_weight;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001652 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001653 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001654 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001655 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001656 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001657 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001658 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001659 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001660 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001661 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001662 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001663 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001664 u8 uapsd_queues;
1665 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001666};
1667
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001668/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001669 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1670 *
1671 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1672 *
1673 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1674 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1675 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1676 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1677 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001678 *
1679 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001680 */
1681struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1682
1683/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001684 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1685 *
1686 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1687 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1688 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001689static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1690{
1691 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1692}
1693
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001694/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001695 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001696 *
1697 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1698 * @addr: the address to set
1699 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001700static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1701{
1702 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1703}
1704
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001705static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1706ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001707 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001708{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001709 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001710 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001711 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001712}
1713
1714static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1715ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001716 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001717{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001718 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001719 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001720 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001721}
1722
1723static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1724ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001725 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001726{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001727 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001728 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001729 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001730}
1731
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001732/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001733 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1734 * @hw: the hardware
1735 * @skb: the skb
1736 *
1737 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1738 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1739 */
1740void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1741
1742/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001743 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001744 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001745 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1746 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1747 *
1748 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1749 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001750 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1751 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1752 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001753 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1754 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1755 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001756 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1757 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1758 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1759 *
1760 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1761 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1762 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1763 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1764 *
1765 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1766 *
1767 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1768 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1769 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1770 * based on the receive flags.
1771 *
1772 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1773 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1774 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1775 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001776 *
1777 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1778 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1779 * handler.
1780 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001781 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001782 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1783 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001784 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001785 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001786 *
1787 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1788 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1789 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001790 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001791
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001792/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001793 * DOC: Powersave support
1794 *
1795 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1796 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001797 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1798 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1799 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1800 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1801 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1802 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1803 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1804 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001805 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001806 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1807 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1808 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001809 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1810 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001811 *
1812 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1813 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
1814 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001815 *
1816 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
1817 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
1818 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
1819 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001820 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
1821 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001822 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001823 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001824 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
1825 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
1826 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
1827 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
1828 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
1829 * periods.
1830 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001831 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001832 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
1833 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
1834 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
1835 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
1836 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
1837 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
1838 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
1839 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
1840 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
1841 *
1842 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
1843 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
1844 * uapsd paramater in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
1845 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
1846 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
1847 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
1848 *
1849 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
1850 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001851 */
1852
1853/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001854 * DOC: Beacon filter support
1855 *
1856 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08001857 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001858 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
1859 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
1860 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
1861 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
1862 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
1863 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001864 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
1865 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001866 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
1867 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
1868 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
1869 *
1870 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
1871 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
1872 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
1873 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
1874 *
1875 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
1876 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
1877 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
1878 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
1879 * - a list of information element IDs
1880 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
1881 *
1882 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
1883 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
1884 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
1885 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
1886 * vendor information elements.
1887 *
1888 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
1889 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
1890 *
1891 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
1892 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
1893 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
1894 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
1895 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
1896 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
1897 *
1898 *
1899 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
1900 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
1901 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
1902 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
1903 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
1904 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
1905 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
1906 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
1907 *
1908 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
1909 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
1910 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001911 */
1912
1913/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001914 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
1915 *
1916 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
1917 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
1918 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
1919 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
1920 *
1921 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
1922 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
1923 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
1924 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
1925 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
1926 * hardware flags.
1927 *
1928 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
1929 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
1930 * turned off otherwise.
1931 *
1932 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
1933 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
1934 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
1935 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
1936 */
1937
1938/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001939 * DOC: Frame filtering
1940 *
1941 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
1942 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
1943 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
1944 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
1945 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
1946 *
1947 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
1948 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
1949 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
1950 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02001951 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
1952 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
1953 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
1954 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
1955 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
1956 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
1957 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001958 *
1959 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
1960 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
1961 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
1962 * or dropped.
1963 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01001964 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
1965 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
1966 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
1967 * the flag, but not clear it.
1968 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
1969 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
1970 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
1971 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
1972 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
1973 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
1974 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
1975 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001976 */
1977
1978/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02001979 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
1980 *
1981 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
1982 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
1983 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
1984 *
1985 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
1986 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
1987 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
1988 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
1989 * the driver code.
1990 *
1991 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
1992 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
1993 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
1994 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
1995 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
1996 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
1997 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
1998 *
1999 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2000 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2001 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2002 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2003 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2004 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2005 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2006 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2007 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2008 * @sta_notify callback.
2009 *
2010 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2011 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2012 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2013 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2014 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2015 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2016 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002017 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002018 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2019 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2020 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2021 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2022 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2023 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2024 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002025 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2026 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2027 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002028 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2029 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2030 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2031 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2032 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2033 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2034 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2035 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2036 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2037 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2038 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2039 *
2040 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2041 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2042 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2043 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2044 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2045 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2046 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2047 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2048 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2049 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2050 * to help the @more_data paramter is passed to tell the driver if
2051 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2052 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2053 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2054 *
2055 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2056 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2057 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2058 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2059 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002060 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002061 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2062 *
2063 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2064 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2065 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2066 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002067 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002068 */
2069
2070/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002071 * DOC: HW queue control
2072 *
2073 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2074 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2075 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2076 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2077 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2078 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2079 *
2080 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2081 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2082 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2083 *
2084 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2085 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2086 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2087 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2088 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2089 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2090 * the hardware queue.
2091 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2092 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2093 *
2094 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2095 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2096 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2097 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2098 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2099 *
2100 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2101 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2102 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2103 * off-channel queue: 9
2104 *
2105 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2106 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2107 *
2108 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2109 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2110 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2111 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2112 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2113 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2114 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2115 *
2116 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2117 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2118 *
2119 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2120 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2121 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2122 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2123 */
2124
2125/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002126 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2127 *
2128 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2129 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2130 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2131 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2132 *
2133 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2134 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2135 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2136 *
2137 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2138 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2139 * multicast address.
2140 *
2141 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2142 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2143 *
2144 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2145 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2146 *
2147 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2148 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2149 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2150 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2151 * honour this flag if possible.
2152 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002153 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002154 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002155 *
2156 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002157 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002158 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2159 * those addressed to this station.
2160 *
2161 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002162 */
2163enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2164 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2165 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2166 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2167 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2168 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2169 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2170 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002171 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002172 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002173};
2174
2175/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002176 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2177 *
2178 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2179 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002180 *
2181 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2182 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002183 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002184 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2185 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002186 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2187 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2188 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002189 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002190 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2191 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2192 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2193 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2194 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2195 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2196 * session is gone and removes the station.
2197 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2198 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2199 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2200 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002201 */
2202enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2203 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2204 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002205 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002206 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2207 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2208 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002209 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002210};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002211
2212/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002213 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2214 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002215 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2216 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002217 */
2218enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2219 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002220 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002221};
2222
2223/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002224 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2225 *
2226 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002227 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2228 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2229 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002230 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002231 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2232 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2233 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002234 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2235 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002236 */
2237enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2238 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2239 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002240 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002241 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002242};
2243
2244/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002245 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2246 *
2247 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2248 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2249 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2250 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2251 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2252 *
2253 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2254 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2255 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2256 */
2257enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2258 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2259 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2260};
2261
2262/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002263 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2264 *
2265 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2266 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2267 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2268 *
2269 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2270 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2271 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002272 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002273 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002274 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002275 *
2276 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2277 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2278 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2279 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2280 * or zero.
2281 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2282 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2283 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002284 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002285 *
2286 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2287 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2288 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2289 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002290 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2291 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002292 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002293 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002294 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2295 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2296 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2297 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2298 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002299 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2300 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2301 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2302 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002303 *
2304 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2305 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2306 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2307 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2308 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2309 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002310 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2311 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2312 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2313 * in suspend().
2314 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002315 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002316 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002317 * and @stop must be implemented.
2318 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2319 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2320 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2321 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2322 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002323 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002324 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002325 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2326 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2327 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2328 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2329 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2330 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002331 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2332 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2333 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2334 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2335 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2336 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2337 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002338 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002339 *
2340 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2341 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002342 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002343 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002344 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002345 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2346 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2347 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2348 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2349 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002350 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2351 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002352 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002353 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2354 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2355 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2356 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002357 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2358 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002359 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002360 *
Alexander Bondar488b3662013-02-11 14:56:29 +02002361 * @set_multicast_list: Configure the device's interface specific RX multicast
2362 * filter. This callback is optional. This callback must be atomic.
2363 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002364 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002365 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002366 *
2367 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002368 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2369 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002370 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002371 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002372 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002373 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002374 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2375 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2376 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002377 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002378 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002379 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2380 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2381 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2382 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2383 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2384 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002385 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2386 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2387 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2388 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002389 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002390 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002391 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2392 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002393 * that power save is disabled.
2394 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2395 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2396 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2397 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2398 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2399 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2400 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002401 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002402 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002403 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2404 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2405 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2406 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2407 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2408 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2409 * The callback can sleep.
2410 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002411 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2412 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2413 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2414 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2415 *
2416 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
2417 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002418 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2419 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002420 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002421 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002422 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2423 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2424 * this notification.
2425 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002426 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002427 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2428 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002429 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002430 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002431 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2432 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2433 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002434 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002435 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002436 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2437 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2438 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2439 * The callback can sleep.
2440 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002441 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002442 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002443 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002444 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2445 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2446 *
2447 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
2448 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2449 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302450 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2451 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2452 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2453 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2454 *
2455 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2456 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2457 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002458 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002459 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2460 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2461 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002462 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002463 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2464 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2465 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2466 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
2467 * up the list of states.
2468 * The callback can sleep.
2469 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002470 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2471 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2472 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2473 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2474 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2475 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2476 * Must be atomic.
2477 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002478 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002479 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002480 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002481 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002482 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002483 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002484 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002485 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002486 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002487 *
2488 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002489 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002490 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002491 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002492 *
2493 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2494 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2495 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2496 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002497 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002498 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002499 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2500 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2501 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002502 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002503 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002504 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002505 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2506 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2507 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2508 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002509 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002510 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002511 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2512 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002513 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2514 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2515 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2516 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2517 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2518 * - TX: 1.....7
2519 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2520 * - TX: 8..1...
2521 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2522 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2523 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2524 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2525 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002526 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002527 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002528 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002529 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2530 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002531 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2532 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2533 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002534 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002535 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002536 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2537 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
2538 * accordingly. This callback is not required and may sleep.
2539 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002540 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2541 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002542 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002543 *
2544 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002545 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2546 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2547 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2548 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
2549 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002550 *
2551 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2552 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2553 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2554 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002555 *
2556 * @napi_poll: Poll Rx queue for incoming data frames.
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002557 *
2558 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2559 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2560 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2561 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2562 *
2563 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002564 *
2565 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2566 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2567 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2568 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2569 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2570 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002571 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002572 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2573 * must be accepted in this case.
2574 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002575 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2576 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002577 *
2578 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2579 *
2580 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302581 *
2582 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2583 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302584 *
2585 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2586 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2587 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002588 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2589 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002590 *
2591 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2592 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2593 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2594 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
2595 * Note that if the @more_data paramter is %false the driver must check
2596 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2597 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2598 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2599 * more-data bit must always be set.
2600 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2601 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002602 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2603 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2604 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2605 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2606 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2607 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002608 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2609 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2610 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002611 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2612 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002613 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002614 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002615 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002616 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2617 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2618 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002619 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002620 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2621 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2622 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2623 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002624 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002625 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002626 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2627 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2628 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002629 *
2630 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2631 *
2632 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2633 *
2634 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2635 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2636 *
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002637 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2638 * and can sleep.
2639 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002640 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2641 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2642 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2643 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2644 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2645 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2646 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2647 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2648 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2649 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2650 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2651 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002652 *
2653 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2654 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2655 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2656 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2657 * channel context with different settings
2658 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2659 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2660 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2661 * unbound from vif.
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002662 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2663 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2664 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2665 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2666 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2667 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2668 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002669 *
2670 * @restart_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw(), when the
2671 * reconfiguration has completed. This can help the driver implement the
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002672 * reconfiguration step. Also called when reconfiguring because the
2673 * driver's resume function returned 1, as this is just like an "inline"
2674 * hardware restart. This callback may sleep.
2675 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002676 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2677 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2678 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002679 *
2680 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2681 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2682 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
2683 * decremented, and when they reach zero the driver must call
2684 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2685 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
2686 * zero using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
2687 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
2688 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002689 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2690 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2691 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2692 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002693 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002694struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002695 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2696 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2697 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002698 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002699 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002700#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2701 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2702 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002703 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002704#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002705 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002706 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002707 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2708 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02002709 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002710 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002711 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02002712 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002713 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2714 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2715 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2716 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02002717
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002718 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2719 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2720
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002721 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00002722 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002723 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2724 unsigned int changed_flags,
2725 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002726 u64 multicast);
Alexander Bondar488b3662013-02-11 14:56:29 +02002727 void (*set_multicast_list)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2728 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool allmulti,
2729 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
2730
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002731 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2732 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04002733 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002734 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04002735 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002736 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01002737 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2738 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
2739 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2740 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002741 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2742 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2743 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002744 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2745 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02002746 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01002747 struct cfg80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002748 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2749 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002750 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2751 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2752 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
2753 struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies *ies);
2754 void (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2755 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002756 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2757 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002758 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2759 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002760 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
2761 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002762 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002763 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002764 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2765 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2766 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2767 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302768#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2769 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2770 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2771 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2772 struct dentry *dir);
2773 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2774 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2775 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2776 struct dentry *dir);
2777#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002778 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002779 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002780 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2781 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2782 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
2783 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002784 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2785 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2786 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2787 u32 changed);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02002788 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02002789 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002790 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03002791 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2792 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2793 u64 tsf);
2794 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002795 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002796 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01002797 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002798 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002799 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
2800 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02002801 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
2802 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002803 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002804 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002805#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002806 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2807 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002808 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
2809 struct netlink_callback *cb,
2810 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002811#endif
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002812 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002813 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2814 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002815 int (*napi_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int budget);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09002816 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
2817 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002818
2819 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02002820 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002821 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002822 int duration,
2823 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002824 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002825 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
2826 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2827 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302828 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302829 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2830 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002831 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02002832 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002833 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002834
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002835 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2836 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2837 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2838 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2839 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002840 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2841 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2842 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2843 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2844 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002845
2846 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2847 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
2848 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2849 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2850 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
2851 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2852 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2853 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002854 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2855 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002856
2857 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2858 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002859
2860 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2861 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2862 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2863 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2864 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2865 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
2866 u32 changed);
2867 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2868 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2869 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2870 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2871 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2872 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002873
2874 void (*restart_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002875
2876#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
2877 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2878 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2879 struct inet6_dev *idev);
2880#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002881 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2883 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002884
2885 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2886 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002887};
2888
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002889/**
2890 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
2891 *
2892 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
2893 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
2894 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
2895 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
2896 * @priv_data_len.
2897 *
2898 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
2899 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002900 *
2901 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002902 */
2903struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
2904 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops);
2905
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002906/**
2907 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
2908 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01002909 * You must call this function before any other functions in
2910 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
2911 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002912 *
2913 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002914 *
2915 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002916 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002917int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2918
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01002919/**
2920 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
2921 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
2922 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
2923 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
2924 */
2925struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
2926 int throughput;
2927 int blink_time;
2928};
2929
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01002930/**
2931 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
2932 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
2933 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
2934 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
2935 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
2936 */
2937enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
2938 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
2939 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
2940 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
2941};
2942
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002943#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07002944char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2945char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2946char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2947char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2948char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2949 unsigned int flags,
2950 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
2951 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002952#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002953/**
2954 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
2955 *
2956 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
2957 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
2958 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
2959 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
2960 *
2961 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002962 *
2963 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002964 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002965static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
2966{
2967#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
2968 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
2969#else
2970 return NULL;
2971#endif
2972}
2973
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002974/**
2975 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
2976 *
2977 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
2978 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
2979 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
2980 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
2981 *
2982 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002983 *
2984 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002985 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002986static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
2987{
2988#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
2989 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
2990#else
2991 return NULL;
2992#endif
2993}
2994
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01002995/**
2996 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
2997 *
2998 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
2999 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3000 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3001 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3002 *
3003 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003004 *
3005 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003006 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003007static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3008{
3009#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3010 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3011#else
3012 return NULL;
3013#endif
3014}
3015
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003016/**
3017 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3018 *
3019 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3020 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3021 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3022 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3023 *
3024 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003025 *
3026 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003027 */
3028static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3029{
3030#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3031 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3032#else
3033 return NULL;
3034#endif
3035}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003036
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003037/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003038 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3039 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003040 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003041 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3042 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3043 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003044 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3045 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3046 *
3047 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003048 */
3049static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003050ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003051 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3052 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3053{
3054#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003055 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003056 blink_table_len);
3057#else
3058 return NULL;
3059#endif
3060}
3061
3062/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003063 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3064 *
3065 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3066 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3067 *
3068 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3069 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003070void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3071
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003072/**
3073 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3074 *
3075 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3076 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003077 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003078 *
3079 * @hw: the hardware to free
3080 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003081void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3082
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003083/**
3084 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3085 *
3086 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3087 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3088 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3089 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3090 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3091 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3092 *
3093 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3094 */
3095void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3096
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003097/** ieee80211_napi_schedule - schedule NAPI poll
3098 *
3099 * Use this function to schedule NAPI polling on a device.
3100 *
3101 * @hw: the hardware to start polling
3102 */
3103void ieee80211_napi_schedule(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3104
3105/** ieee80211_napi_complete - complete NAPI polling
3106 *
3107 * Use this function to finish NAPI polling on a device.
3108 *
3109 * @hw: the hardware to stop polling
3110 */
3111void ieee80211_napi_complete(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3112
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003113/**
3114 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3115 *
3116 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003117 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3118 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3119 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3120 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003121 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003122 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003123 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3124 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003125 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3126 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003127 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003128 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003129 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003130 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3131 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003132 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003133void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003134
3135/**
3136 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3137 *
3138 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003139 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3140 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003141 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003142 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3143 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003144 *
3145 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3146 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003147 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003148void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003149
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003150/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003151 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3152 *
3153 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3154 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3155 *
3156 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003157 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3158 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003159 *
3160 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3161 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3162 */
3163static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3164 struct sk_buff *skb)
3165{
3166 local_bh_disable();
3167 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3168 local_bh_enable();
3169}
3170
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003171/**
3172 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3173 *
3174 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3175 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3176 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3177 *
3178 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3179 *
3180 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3181 * each other.
3182 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003183 * @sta: currently connected sta
3184 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003185 *
3186 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003187 */
3188int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3189
3190/**
3191 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3192 * (in process context)
3193 *
3194 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3195 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3196 * applies.
3197 *
3198 * @sta: currently connected sta
3199 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003200 *
3201 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003202 */
3203static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3204 bool start)
3205{
3206 int ret;
3207
3208 local_bh_disable();
3209 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3210 local_bh_enable();
3211
3212 return ret;
3213}
3214
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003215/*
3216 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3217 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3218 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003219#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003220
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003221/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003222 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003223 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003224 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3225 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003226 *
3227 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003228 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3229 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003230 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003231 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3232 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3233 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3234 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3235 *
3236 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3237 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3238 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3239 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3240 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3241 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3242 *
3243 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3244 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3245 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3246 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3247 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003248 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003249void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3250 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003251
3252/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003253 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3254 *
3255 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3256 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3257 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3258 *
3259 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3260 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3261 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3262 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3263 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3264 */
3265void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3266 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3267 struct sk_buff *skb,
3268 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3269 int max_rates);
3270
3271/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003272 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3273 *
3274 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3275 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3276 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3277 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003278 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3279 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003280 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003281 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3282 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003283 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003284 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3285 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003286 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003287void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003288 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003289
3290/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003291 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3292 *
3293 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3294 *
3295 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3296 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3297 * for a single hardware.
3298 *
3299 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3300 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3301 */
3302static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3303 struct sk_buff *skb)
3304{
3305 local_bh_disable();
3306 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3307 local_bh_enable();
3308}
3309
3310/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003311 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003312 *
3313 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3314 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3315 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003316 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3317 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003318 *
3319 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3320 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003321 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003322void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003323 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003324
3325/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003326 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3327 *
3328 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3329 * connected STA.
3330 *
3331 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3332 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3333 */
3334void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3335
3336/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003337 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3338 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003339 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003340 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3341 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3342 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3343 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3344 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3345 *
3346 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3347 * obtain the beacon frame/template.
3348 *
3349 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3350 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
3351 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function
3352 * before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
3353 *
3354 * If the beacon frames are generated by the device, then the driver
3355 * must use the returned beacon as the template and change the TIM IE
3356 * according to the current DTIM parameters/TIM bitmap.
3357 *
3358 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003359 *
3360 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003361 */
3362struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3363 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3364 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3365
3366/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003367 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3368 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003369 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003370 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003371 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003372 *
3373 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003374 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003375static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3376 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3377{
3378 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3379}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003380
3381/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003382 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3383 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3384 *
3385 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
3386 * announcement hit zero, this function must be called by the driver to
3387 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3388 */
3389void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3390
3391/**
3392 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached zero
3393 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3394 *
3395 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3396 */
3397bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3398
3399
3400/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003401 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3402 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3403 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3404 *
3405 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3406 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3407 *
3408 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003409 *
3410 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003411 */
3412struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3413 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3414
3415/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003416 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3417 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3418 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3419 *
3420 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3421 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3422 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3423 *
3424 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3425 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003426 *
3427 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003428 */
3429struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3430 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3431
3432/**
3433 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3434 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3435 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3436 *
3437 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3438 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3439 * BSSID and address is used.
3440 *
3441 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3442 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003443 *
3444 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003445 */
3446struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3447 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3448
3449/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003450 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3451 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3452 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3453 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3454 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003455 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003456 *
3457 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3458 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003459 *
3460 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003461 */
3462struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3463 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3464 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003465 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003466
3467/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003468 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3469 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003470 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003471 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3472 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003473 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003474 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3475 *
3476 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3477 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3478 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3479 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3480 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003481void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003482 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003483 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003484 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3485
3486/**
3487 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3488 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003489 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003490 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003491 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003492 *
3493 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3494 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3495 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003496 *
3497 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003498 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003499__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3500 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003501 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003502
3503/**
3504 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3505 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003506 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003507 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3508 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003509 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003510 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3511 *
3512 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3513 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3514 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3515 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3516 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003517void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3518 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003519 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003520 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003521 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3522
3523/**
3524 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3525 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003526 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003527 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003528 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003529 *
3530 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3531 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3532 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003533 *
3534 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003535 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003536__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3537 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003538 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003539 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003540
3541/**
3542 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3543 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003544 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003545 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003546 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003547 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003548 *
3549 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3550 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003551 *
3552 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003553 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003554__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003556 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003557 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003558 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003559
3560/**
3561 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3562 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003563 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003564 *
3565 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3566 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3567 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3568 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003569 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3570 *
3571 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3572 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003573 *
3574 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3575 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3576 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3577 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3578 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3579 * use common code for all beacons.
3580 */
3581struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003582ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003583
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003584/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003585 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3586 *
3587 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3588 *
3589 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3590 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3591 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3592 */
3593void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3594 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3595
3596/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003597 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003598 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003599 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3600 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003601 *
3602 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003603 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
3604 * with this P1K
3605 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003606 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003607static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3608 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
3609{
3610 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
3611 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
3612 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
3613
3614 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
3615}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003616
3617/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02003618 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
3619 *
3620 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
3621 * and transmitter address.
3622 *
3623 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3624 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
3625 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3626 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3627 */
3628void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3629 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3630
3631/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003632 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
3633 *
3634 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
3635 * in the packet.
3636 *
3637 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3638 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
3639 * encrypted with this key
3640 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
3641 */
3642void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3643 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003644
3645/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03003646 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
3647 *
3648 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
3649 * previously installed master key.
3650 *
3651 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3652 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
3653 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
3654 */
3655void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3656 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
3657
3658/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02003659 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
3660 *
3661 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
3662 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3663 * reverse order than in packet)
3664 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3665 * reverse order than in packet)
3666 */
3667struct ieee80211_key_seq {
3668 union {
3669 struct {
3670 u32 iv32;
3671 u16 iv16;
3672 } tkip;
3673 struct {
3674 u8 pn[6];
3675 } ccmp;
3676 struct {
3677 u8 pn[6];
3678 } aes_cmac;
3679 };
3680};
3681
3682/**
3683 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
3684 *
3685 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3686 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3687 *
3688 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
3689 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
3690 * offloaded to the device.
3691 *
3692 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3693 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
3694 * and the stop has been synchronized.
3695 */
3696void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3697 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3698
3699/**
3700 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
3701 *
3702 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3703 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3704 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3705 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3706 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3707 *
3708 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
3709 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
3710 * by the device and not by mac80211.
3711 *
3712 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3713 * can be done concurrently.
3714 */
3715void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3716 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3717
3718/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02003719 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
3720 *
3721 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3722 * @seq: new sequence data
3723 *
3724 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
3725 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
3726 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
3727 * ARP requests.
3728 *
3729 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3730 * can be done concurrently.
3731 */
3732void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3733 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3734
3735/**
3736 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
3737 *
3738 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3739 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3740 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3741 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3742 * @seq: new sequence data
3743 *
3744 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
3745 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
3746 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
3747 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
3748 *
3749 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3750 * can be done concurrently.
3751 */
3752void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3753 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3754
3755/**
3756 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
3757 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3758 *
3759 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
3760 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
3761 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
3762 *
3763 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
3764 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
3765 */
3766void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3767
3768/**
3769 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
3770 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
3771 * @keyconf: new key data
3772 *
3773 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
3774 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
3775 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
3776 *
3777 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
3778 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
3779 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
3780 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
3781 *
3782 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
3783 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
3784 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
3785 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
3786 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
3787 * of the reconfiguration.
3788 *
3789 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
3790 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
3791 *
3792 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
3793 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
3794 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
3795 * the key that's being replaced.
3796 */
3797struct ieee80211_key_conf *
3798ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3799 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3800
3801/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003802 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
3803 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
3804 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
3805 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
3806 * @gfp: allocation flags
3807 */
3808void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
3809 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
3810
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003811/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003812 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
3813 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3814 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3815 *
3816 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3817 */
3818void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3819
3820/**
3821 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
3822 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3823 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3824 *
3825 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3826 */
3827void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3828
3829/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003830 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
3831 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3832 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3833 *
3834 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003835 *
3836 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003837 */
3838
3839int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3840
3841/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003842 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
3843 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3844 *
3845 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3846 */
3847void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3848
3849/**
3850 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
3851 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3852 *
3853 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3854 */
3855void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3856
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003857/**
3858 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
3859 *
3860 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
3861 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02003862 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
3863 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003864 *
3865 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003866 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003867 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003868void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003869
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003870/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003871 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
3872 *
3873 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
3874 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
3875 *
3876 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3877 */
3878void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3879
3880/**
3881 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
3882 *
3883 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
3884 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
3885 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
3886 * while associating, for instance.
3887 *
3888 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3889 */
3890void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3891
3892/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003893 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
3894 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
3895 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
3896 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
3897 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
3898 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3899 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
3900 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3901 */
3902enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
3903 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
3904 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
3905};
3906
3907/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003908 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003909 *
3910 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3911 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003912 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
3913 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
3914 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003915 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003916 *
3917 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003918 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003919 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003920 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
3921 */
3922void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003923 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003924 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003925 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003926 void *data);
3927
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003928/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003929 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
3930 *
3931 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3932 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
3933 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
3934 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003935 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003936 *
3937 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003938 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003939 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
3940 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
3941 */
3942void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003943 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003944 void (*iterator)(void *data,
3945 u8 *mac,
3946 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
3947 void *data);
3948
3949/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02003950 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
3951 *
3952 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3953 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
3954 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
3955 *
3956 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
3957 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
3958 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
3959 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
3960 */
3961void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3962 u32 iter_flags,
3963 void (*iterator)(void *data,
3964 u8 *mac,
3965 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
3966 void *data);
3967
3968/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04003969 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3970 *
3971 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
3972 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
3973 *
3974 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
3975 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
3976 */
3977void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
3978
3979/**
3980 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3981 *
3982 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
3983 * workqueue.
3984 *
3985 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
3986 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
3987 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
3988 */
3989void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3990 struct delayed_work *dwork,
3991 unsigned long delay);
3992
3993/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003994 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003995 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003996 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05303997 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07003998 *
3999 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004000 *
4001 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4002 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4003 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4004 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304005int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4006 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004007
4008/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004009 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004010 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004011 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4012 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4013 *
4014 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004015 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4016 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004017 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004018void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004019 u16 tid);
4020
4021/**
4022 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004023 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004024 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004025 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004026 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004027 *
4028 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4029 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4030 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4031 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004032int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004033
4034/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004035 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004037 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4038 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4039 *
4040 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004041 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4042 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004043 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004044void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004045 u16 tid);
4046
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004047/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004048 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4049 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004050 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004051 * @addr: station's address
4052 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004053 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4054 *
4055 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004056 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4057 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004058struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004059 const u8 *addr);
4060
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004061/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004062 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004063 *
4064 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004065 * @addr: remote station's address
4066 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004067 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004068 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4069 *
4070 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004071 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4072 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004073 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4074 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4075 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4076 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4077 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4078 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4079 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004080 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004081 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004082 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004083struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4084 const u8 *addr,
4085 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004086
4087/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004088 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4089 * @hw: the hardware
4090 * @pubsta: the station
4091 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4092 *
4093 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4094 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4095 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4096 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4097 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4098 *
4099 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4100 * manner.
4101 *
4102 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4103 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4104 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4105 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4106 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4107 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4108 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4109 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4110 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4111 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4112 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4113 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4114 * woke up while blocked or not.
4115 */
4116void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4117 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4118
4119/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004120 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4121 * @pubsta: the station
4122 *
4123 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4124 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4125 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4126 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4127 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004128 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4129 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4130 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4131 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4132 *
4133 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4134 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4135 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4136 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004137 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004138void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004139
4140/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004141 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4142 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4143 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4144 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4145 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4146 *
4147 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4148 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4149 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4150 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4151 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4152 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004153 *
4154 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4155 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4156 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004157 */
4158void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4159 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4160 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4161 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4162 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4163 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4164 void *data),
4165 void *iter_data);
4166
4167/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004168 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4169 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4170 * @iter: iterator function
4171 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4172 *
4173 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4174 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4175 * places while calling into the driver.
4176 *
4177 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4178 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4179 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004180 *
4181 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4182 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4183 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4184 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004185 */
4186void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4187 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4188 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4189 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4190 void *data),
4191 void *iter_data);
4192
4193/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004194 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4195 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4196 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4197 *
4198 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4199 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4200 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4201 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4202 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004203 * %NULL.
4204 *
4205 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004206 */
4207struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4208 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4209
4210/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004211 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4212 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004213 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004214 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004215 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004216 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004217 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4218 */
4219void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004220
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004221/**
4222 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4223 *
4224 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4225 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004226 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004227 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4228 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004229 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4230 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004231 *
4232 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4233 * without connection recovery attempts.
4234 */
4235void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4236
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004237/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004238 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4239 *
4240 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4241 *
4242 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4243 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4244 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4245 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4246 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4247 *
4248 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4249 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4250 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4251 * disconnect normally later.
4252 *
4253 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4254 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4255 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4256 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4257 */
4258void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4259
4260/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004261 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4262 * rssi threshold triggered
4263 *
4264 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4265 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4266 * @gfp: context flags
4267 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004268 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004269 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4270 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4271 */
4272void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4273 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4274 gfp_t gfp);
4275
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004276/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004277 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4278 *
4279 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4280 */
4281void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4282
4283/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004284 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4285 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4286 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4287 *
4288 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4289 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4290 */
4291void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4292
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004293/**
4294 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4295 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004296 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004297 *
4298 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4299 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4300 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4301 */
4302void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4303 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4304
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004305/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004306 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4307 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4308 */
4309void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4310
4311/**
4312 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4313 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4314 */
4315void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4316
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004317/**
4318 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4319 *
4320 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4321 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4322 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4323 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4324 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4325 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4326 *
4327 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4328 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4329 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4330 */
4331void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4332 const u8 *addr);
4333
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004334/**
4335 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4336 *
4337 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4338 * buffer.
4339 *
4340 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4341 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4342 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4343 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4344 */
4345void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4346
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004347/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004348
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004349/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004350 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004351 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004352 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4353 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4354 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004355 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4356 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004357 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4358 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4359 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4360 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4361 * RTS threshold
4362 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4363 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004364 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004365 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4366 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004367 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004368 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004369 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004370 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004371struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4372 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4373 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4374 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4375 struct sk_buff *skb;
4376 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4377 bool rts, short_preamble;
4378 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004379 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004380 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004381 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004382};
4383
4384struct rate_control_ops {
4385 struct module *module;
4386 const char *name;
4387 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004388 void (*free)(void *priv);
4389
4390 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4391 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004392 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004393 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304394 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004395 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004396 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4397 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004398 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4399 void *priv_sta);
4400
4401 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4402 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4403 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004404 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4405 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004406
4407 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4408 struct dentry *dir);
4409 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
4410};
4411
4412static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4413 enum ieee80211_band band,
4414 int index)
4415{
4416 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4417}
4418
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004419/**
4420 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4421 *
4422 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4423 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4424 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4425 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4426 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4427 * not null.
4428 *
4429 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4430 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4431 *
4432 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4433 * that this may be null.
4434 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4435 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4436 */
4437bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4438 void *priv_sta,
4439 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4440
4441
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004442static inline s8
4443rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4444 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4445{
4446 int i;
4447
4448 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4449 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4450 return i;
4451
4452 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004453 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004454
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004455 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004456 return 0;
4457}
4458
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004459static inline
4460bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4461 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4462{
4463 unsigned int i;
4464
4465 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4466 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4467 return true;
4468 return false;
4469}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004470
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004471/**
4472 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4473 *
4474 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4475 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4476 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4477 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4478 *
4479 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4480 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4481 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4482 */
4483int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4484 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4485 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4486
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004487int ieee80211_rate_control_register(struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4488void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4489
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004490static inline bool
4491conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4492{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004493 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004494}
4495
4496static inline bool
4497conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4498{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004499 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4500 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004501}
4502
4503static inline bool
4504conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4505{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004506 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4507 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004508}
4509
4510static inline bool
4511conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4512{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004513 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004514}
4515
4516static inline bool
4517conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4518{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004519 return conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004520}
4521
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02004522static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4523ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4524{
4525 if (p2p) {
4526 switch (type) {
4527 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4528 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4529 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4530 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4531 default:
4532 break;
4533 }
4534 }
4535 return type;
4536}
4537
4538static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4539ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4540{
4541 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
4542}
4543
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07004544void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4545 int rssi_min_thold,
4546 int rssi_max_thold);
4547
4548void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03004549
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004550/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004551 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004552 *
4553 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
4554 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004555 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
4556 *
4557 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
4558 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004559 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07004560int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4561
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01004562/**
4563 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
4564 * @vif: virtual interface
4565 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
4566 * @gfp: allocation flags
4567 *
4568 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
4569 */
4570void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4571 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
4572 gfp_t gfp);
4573
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02004574/**
4575 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
4576 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4577 * @vif: virtual interface
4578 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
4579 * @band: the band to transmit on
4580 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
4581 *
4582 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
4583 */
4584bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4585 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
4586 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
4587
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004588#endif /* MAC80211_H */